photoshop

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﺑﻨﺎﻡ ﺧﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ Photoshop‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ‪ Adobe‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻓﺘﻮﺷﺎﭖ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻱ ﻗﺪﺭﺗﻤﻨﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎﮊ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎﮊ ﻋﻜﺴﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻃﺮﺣﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ Photoshop‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ Photoshop‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ‪ *.psd‬ﻳﺎ ‪ *.pdd‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ‪ ...‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ Photoshop‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ‪ Start / Programs / Adobe Photoshop‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Photoshop‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺗﻲ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻭ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﻧﻴﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻚ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﻱ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ‪، CMYK ، RGB‬‬ ‫‪ GRAYSCALE ، HSB‬ﻭ ‪...‬‬ ‫‪-۱‬‬

‫‪ :Bitmap‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻃﺮﺡ ﺑﻴﺘﻲ )‪ (Bitmap‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻱ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺪ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ‪ Bitmap‬ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ Grayscale‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-٢‬‬

‫‪ :RGB‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺪ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﺳﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‪، Red‬‬ ‫ﺳﺒﺰ‪ Green‬ﻭ ﺁﺑﻲ ‪ Blue‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺪ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﻭﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺎﻧﻴﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﺍ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﻩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺑﻴﺘﻲ )‪ (24bit‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ‪ ١٦‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :CMYK -٣‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺪ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﭼﺎﭖ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ‬ ‫ﺁﺑﻲ ﻓﻴﺮﻭﺯﻩ ﺍﻱ‪ ، Cyan‬ﺳﺮﺧﺎﺑﻲ‪ ، Magenta‬ﺯﺭﺩ ‪ ، Yellow‬ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ‪ Black‬ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ‪.‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ‪ CMYK‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﺎﭖ‬ ‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺑﻴﺘﻲ )‪( 32bit‬ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Index Color -٤‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺪ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ‪ Index Color‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫‪ :HSB -٥‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺪ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ )ﺍﺭﺯﺵ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪) (H=Hue‬ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ (S=Saturation‬ﻭ‬ ‫)ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ‪ (B=Brightness‬ﺳﻨﺠﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Lab -٦‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Photoshop‬ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ‪ ,‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﮕﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫‪ PostScript Level2‬ﭼﺎﭖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺎﻧﻴﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ‬ ‫ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻛﺎﻟﻴﺒﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺗﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :GRAYSCALE -٧‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ‪ ۲۵۶‬ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺧﺎﻛﺴﺘﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻜﺴﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﻋﻜﺲ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Duotone -٨‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺧﺎﻛﺴﺘﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺟﻮﻫﺮ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ‬ ‫ﭼﺎﭖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺧﺎﻛﺴﺘﺮﻱ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻓﺘﻮﺷﺎﭖ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺑﻴﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺭﻳﺰ ‪ Pixel‬ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺳﺎﻳﺰﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻨﻚ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﭼﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﻪ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ؟‬ ‫ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ) ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ( ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ١١٨‬ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ١٠٠-١٢٠‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻱ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ١٢٠-١٥٠‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻻﺑﻪ ﻻﻱ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﻫﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ‪ Anti Aliased‬ﻳﺎ ﺿﺪ ﭘﻠﮕﻲ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺒﺤﺚ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ‪ Resolution‬ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻳﻨﭻ‬ ‫)‪ (Dot per inch‬ﻳﺎ )‪ (DPI‬ﻛﻪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻴﺪ ‪ ١١٨‬ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ‪.‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫ﭘﺲ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭼﺎﭖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻭ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ‪٣٠٠-١٤٤٠ dpi‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Photoshop‬ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ‪ ٣٠٠-٦٠٠ dpi‬ﻣﺪ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪CMYK‬‬

‫ﻭ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ *.tif‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻛﺎﻟﻴﺒﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺩﺭ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‪،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻴﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﻛﺎﻟﻴﺒﺮﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤـﺎﻳﺶ ﺑـﺎ‬ ‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﻛﺎﻟﻴﺒﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ Photoshop‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻠﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻴﻔﻴـﺖ‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭼﺎﭖ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻕ ﻣـﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ‪.‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨـﻴﻦ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻋﻤـﻞ ﺭﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳـﻚ ﭼـﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﭼـﺎﭖ ﻣـﻲ ﺷـﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳـﻚ ﻧﻤـﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻧﻴﺘﻮﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ Photoshop‬ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻧـﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻫـﺎ ﺗـﺎﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﺎﻧﻴﺘﻮﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻟﻴﺒﺮﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ,‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﺭﻧﮕﻬـﺎﻱ ﺣﺎﺻـﻞ ‪ ،‬ﺑـﺎ ﺁﻧﭽـﻪ ﻛـﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻـﻔﺤﻪ ﻣـﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻳـﻚ ﻓﺎﻳـﻞ ‪ CMYK‬ﺍﻳﺠـﺎﺩ ﺷـﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﻪ ‪Photoshop‬‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ‪ CMYK , RGB‬ﻭ ‪ Grayscale‬ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﻟﻴﺒﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ‪ ,‬ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻳـﺎ ﺍﻳﺠـﺎﺩ ﺷـﺪﻩ ‪ ,‬ﺑـﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ‪ ,‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤـﻴﻂ ﺭﻧـﮓ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪ ,‬ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﻤـﺮﺍﻩ ﺑـﺎ ﻓﺎﻳـﻞ ﺫﺧﻴـﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Photoshop‬ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻟﻴﺒﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -۱‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭼﺎﭘﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﺎﻟﻴﺒﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ‪ ,‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗـﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪,‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﺗﺎﺑﻲ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -۲‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ ‪ RGB‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -۳‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ‪ CMYK‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﻲ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ ,‬ﻧﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ )‪.(Gamma‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻟﻴﺒﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺩﺭ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻴﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻠﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻛﺎﻟﻴﺒﺮﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑـﺎ ﺧﺮﻭﺟـﻲ‬ ‫ﭼﺎﭘﻲ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺑـﻪ ﻧـﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻏﺬﻱ ﻛـﻪ ﺗـﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﭼـﺎﭖ‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺟﻮﻫﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﺎﭖ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﺎﻟﻴﺒﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Control Panel‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺁﻳﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ Adobe Gamma‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‪ :‬ﻛﺎﻟﻴﺒﺮﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻠﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪ ‪ RGB‬ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻣـﺪ ‪ CMYK‬ﺑـﻪ ﻃـﻮﺭ ﻳﻜـﺴﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ RGB‬ﺑﻪ ‪ , CMYK‬ﺍﻓﺖ ﻛﻴﻔﻴـﺖ ﺯﻳـﺎﺩﻱ ﺧـﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷـﺖ ﭼـﺮﺍ ﻛـﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻟﻴﺒﺮﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﻣﺎﻧﻴﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‪ Photoshop‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ File / New‬ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ Ctrl+N‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳـﺎ ﻛﻠﻴـﺪ ‪ Ctrl‬ﺭﺍ ﭘـﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻧﮕـﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺍﺑﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Name‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Preset size‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﺎﻳﺰﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻗـﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧـﺪ ﻧﻤﻮﻧـﻪ ﻫـﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻳﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻳﺰﻱ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﻏـﺬ ﺧـﻮﺩ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴـﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻗـﺴﻤﺖ‬ ‫‪ Width‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Height‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴـﺮﻱ ﻛﺎﻏـﺬ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Resolution‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Mode‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﺪ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Contents‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﺔ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ‪ Background‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ White‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ Background color‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ Background‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ Transparent‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ ﻛـﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻃﺮﺡ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺑﻲ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﺎﻳﻠﻮﻥ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴـﺮ ﺭﻧـﮓ ﻫـﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣـﺪ ﺭﻧﮕـﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳـﺐ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴـﺮ ﺩﻫﻴـﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴـﺪ ﺭﻧـﮓ ﭘـﻴﺶ ﺯﻣﻴﻨـﻪ ﻭ ﭘـﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨـﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺎ ﻫـﻢ ﺟﺎﺑﺠـﺎ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ ﺑـﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻓﻠـﺶ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻓـﺔ ﻛﻨـﺎﺭ ﺭﻧﮕﻬـﺎ‬ ‫)‪ (Switch Foreground and Background Colors‬ﻛﻠﻴــﻚ ﻛﻨﻴــﺪ ‪.‬ﻭ ﺑﺎﻛﻠﻴــﻚ ﺑــﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﻤــﺎﺩ ﭘــﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬ ‫)‪ (Default Foreground and Background Colors‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ﭘـﻴﺶ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪File / Open‬‬

‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Ctrl+O‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺍﺑﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ﻓﺘﻮﺷﺎﭖ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﭘـﺴﻮﻧﺪ ﻏﻴـﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ *.psd‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻧﻴــﺰ ﺑــﺎﺯ ﻛﻨــﺪ ﻣﺜــﻞ )‪، *.flm ، *.jpg ، *.gif ، *.bmp‬‬ ‫‪ ، *.pdf ، *.pcx‬ﻭ ‪( ...‬‬ ‫‪File / Open as‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Open‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﻓـﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻧـﻮﻉ ﺧـﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻣﺜﻼ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻃﻦ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ‪ *.psd‬ﺫﺧﻴـﺮﻩ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺍﻧـﺪ ﻭﻟـﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻇـﺎﻫﺮ ﭘـﺴﻮﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻣﺜﻼ ‪ *.jpg‬ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﮋﺓ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻓﺘﻮﺷﺎﭖ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﺳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻳـﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻜﺲ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑـﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺸﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻨـﻚ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Rectangular Marquee Tool‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪M‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Rectangle Marquee‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫـﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ‬ ‫)‪ ( Select‬ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺴﺖ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑـﺰﺍﺭ ﻋﻤـﻞ ‪ Select‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠـﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴـﺪ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺧﻂ ﭼﻴﻦ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛـﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻤـﻞ ﺩﺭﮒ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠـﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Select‬ﺭﺍﺑﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺑﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻳﻜﺒﺎﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ ﻣﺤـﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ ﺧـﺎﺭﺝ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ‪ Ctrl+D‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪ Selection‬ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺿـﺎﻓﻪ ﻛـﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻬـﺎ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕـﺎﻡ ‪ Select‬ﻛﻠﻴـﺪ‬ ‫‪ Shift‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ‪ Option‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺔ ‪ Add to Selection‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴـﺪ ﻛﻠﻴـﺪ ‪ Alt‬ﺭﺍ ﭘـﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻧﮕـﻪ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻪ ﻳـﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻧـﻮﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪ Options‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺔ ‪ Subtract from Selection‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‪ Elliptical Marquee Tool‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪M‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﻀﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ‪ Rectangle Marquee‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﻴـﺰ ﺻـﺎﺩﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭼﻪ ﺗﻮﺳـﻂ ‪ Rectangular Marquee‬ﻭ ﭼـﻪ ﺗﻮﺳـﻂ ‪ Elliptical Marquee‬ﻛﻠﻴـﺪ ‪ Shift‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ‪ Selection‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Alt‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Rectangle Marquee‬ﻭ ‪ Elliptical Marquee‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪ Style‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Options‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪ Style‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺔ ‪ Normal‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ Fixed Aspect Ratio‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺔ ‪ Width‬ﻭ ‪ Height‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﻳـﻚ ﻧـﺴﺒﺘﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻴﻦ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ Fixed Size‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻃـﻮﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‪Single Row Marquee Tool‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Selection‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﻂ ﺻﺎﻑ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‪Single Column Marquee Tool‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Selection‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﻂ ﺻﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ‪ Select‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻳﺠـﺎﺩ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻨـﺪ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨـﺔ ‪ Anti –Aliased‬ﻓﻌـﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﺿﺪ ﭘﻠﮕﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎ ﻣﻴﺴﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈـﺮ ﻣـﻲ ﺭﺳـﺪ ‪ .‬ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺠـﺎﻡ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬـﺎﻱ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺣﺮﻓﻪ ﺍﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺔ ‪ Anti-Aliased‬ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺮ ﻳﺎ ‪ Fade‬ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻟﺒﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Select‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺔ ‪ Feather‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘـﺮ ﻳـﺎ ﻣـﺎﺕ ﺷـﺪﻥ ﻟﺒـﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ Select‬ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Feather‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻤﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤـﻞ ‪ Select‬ﻣﺤـﺪﻭﺩﻩ ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ Select‬ﺑﻪ ﻟﺒﺔ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ Feather‬ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Select / Feather‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Move Tool‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪V‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Move‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﺎﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺟﺎﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Alt‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻳﻚ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺯ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Option‬‬

‫‪ -١‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ : Auto Select Layer‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻻﻳـﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳـﻞ ﻫﻤـﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻻﻳﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺸﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺎﺑﻪ ﺟـﺎﻳﻲ ﺑـﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﺓ ‪ Layer‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Window‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻗـﺪﺍﻡ ﺑـﻪ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -٢‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ : Show Bounding Box‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻻﻳﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﻻﻳﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺩﺍﺑﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ‬

‫‪8‬‬

‫ﻋﻼﻣـﺖ ﺗﻴـﻚ‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ‪ Option‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Move‬ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣـﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﺑـﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪Apply‬‬

‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺩﻫﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Lasso Tool‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪L‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Lasso Tool‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑـﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﻣﻴﺘـﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺤـﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗـﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ‪Select‬‬

‫ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Polygonal Lasso Tool‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪L‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﺧﻄـﻮﻁ ﺻـﺎﻑ ﻣـﻲ ﺗـﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺤـﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ‪ Select‬ﻛﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Magnetic Lasso Tool‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪L‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻳﻜﺒﺎﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑـﺰﺍﺭ‬

‫ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﻫﻨﺮﺑﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﻲ ﭼﺴﺒﺪ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻞ ‪ Select‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Option‬‬ ‫‪ :Width -١‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺳﻌﺖ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ‪ Select‬ﻛﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ‬

‫ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﺳﻌﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭﺳﻴﻌﺘﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Edge Contrast -٢‬ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﺸﺶ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ‪ Select‬ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Frequency -٣‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺰﻣﻲ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴـﺴﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴـﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ‪ Select‬ﻧﺮﻣﺘﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Pen Pressure -٤‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ‪ Select‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Magic Wand Tool‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪W‬‬

‫‪Select‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮕـﻲ ﺍﻧﺠـﺎﻡ ﻣـﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺍﺑـﺰﺍﺭ ﻳﻜـﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻬﺘـﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫـﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺟـﺎﺩﻭﻳﻲ ﻧﻴـﺰ ﻣﻌـﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Option‬‬

‫‪9‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫‪ :Tolerance -١‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺩﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻴـﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻣﺤـﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻴﻌﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Contiguous -٢‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺎ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺾ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫـﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Use All Layers -٣‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ‪ Select‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Zoom Tool‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪Z‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻧﻤـﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻮﺿـﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗـﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪Alt‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ :Hand Tool‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪H‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪Select‬‬

‫‪ :All -١‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Ctrl+A‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻞ ﻻﻳﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Deselect -٢‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Ctrl + D‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ‪ Select‬ﺧـﺎﺭﺝ ﻛـﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Reselect -٣‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Shift+Ctrl+D‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷـﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻻﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪Select‬ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ‪Select‬ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣـﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Inverse -٤‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Shift+Ctrl+I‬ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻴـﺔ ‪Select‬‬

‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Color Range -٥‬ﻳﻜــﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭘــﺮ ﻗــﺪﺭﺕ ﺗــﺮﻳﻦ ﺩﺳــﺘﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗـﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺭﻧـﮓ ﻣﺸﺨـﺼﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻗـﺴﻤﺖ ‪Select‬‬

‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺟـﻮﺩ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻣـﺸﺨﺺ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨــﺔ ‪ Fuzziness‬ﻣﻘــﺪﺍﺭ ﭘﺨــﺶ ﺷــﺪﮔﻲ ﻭ ﮔــﺴﺘﺮﺵ‬ ‫‪ Selection‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻗــﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Selection Preview‬ﻣــﻲ ﺗــﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺿــﻌﻴﺖ‬

‫‪10‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻭ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﻄﺮﻩ ﭼﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ Invert‬ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ‪ Selection‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Feather -٦‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Alt+Ctrl+D‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘ‪‬ﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺤـﺪﻭﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Modify -٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻒ(‪ : Border‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Border‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ‪ Select‬ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻫﺮ ﭼـﻪ ﻣﻘـﺪﺍﺭ‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ١-٢٠٠‬ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺏ( ‪ : Smooth‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﺮﻡ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻟﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ‪ Select‬ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑﻴـﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻛـﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻴﺰ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ١-١٠٠‬ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺝ ( ‪ : Expand‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻦ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻗـﺴﻤﺖ ‪Expand by‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩ ( ‪ : Contract‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺤـﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺑﻲ ﺑـﺎ ﺗﻮﺟـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﻣﻘـﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌـﻴﻦ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻗـﺴﻤﺖ‬ ‫‪ Contract by‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ : Grow -٨‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺔ ‪ Tolerance‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑـﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Magic wand tool‬ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑـﺮ ﻃﺒـﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ‪ Tolerance‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Grow‬ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺭﺷﺪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ‪ Select‬ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ : Similar -٩‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻫﻤﺮﻧﮓ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﺓ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ‪ Select‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷـﺪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺩﺳـﺘﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺪﺭﺗﻤﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ : Transform Selection -١٠‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ‪ Select‬ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣـﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻳـﺎ ﺑـﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ‪ Select‬ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ‪ Select‬ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ‪ Select‬ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺗـﺎ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺑﺘـﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑـﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤـﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Save Selection‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Name‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ‪ Select‬ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻧﻲ ‪ Selection‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ‪ Select‬ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻼ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ Save Selection‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻓﻌـﺎﻝ ﻣـﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ‪ Selection‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ‬

‫‪11‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﻲ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻃﺮﺡ ﻳﺎ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴـﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻳـﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﺮﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻃﺮﺣﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‪ Photoshop‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺮ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺣﻀﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ‪ window/layer‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺘﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ‪ PSD‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ( ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠـﺮﻩ ‪ Layers‬ﻻﻳـﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ‪ Background‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺷـﻤﺎ ﻧﻤـﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴـﺪ ‪ Background‬ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﺑـﻪ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺣﻜﻢ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ‪ Background‬ﺑﻪ ﻻﻳﻪ ) ﺗﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺟﺎﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ( ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨـﻮﻱ‬ ‫‪ Layer/New/Layer from background‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠـﺮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻛـﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Name‬ﻣـﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴـﺪ ﻧـﺎﻣﻲ ﺟﺪﻳـﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ color‬ﺭﻧﮓ ‪Thumbnail‬ﻛﻨـﺎﺭ ﻧـﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻻﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Mode‬ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ﺗﺮﺳـﻴﻤﻲ ﺗـﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨــﻪ ‪ Opacity‬ﻣﻘــﺪﺍﺭ ﻣــﺎﺕ ﺑــﻮﺩﻥ ﻳــﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﭼﻪ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺭﻭﻳﻴﻦ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ‪ Background‬ﺑﻪ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Background‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Layers‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺍﺑﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺑـــﺮﺍﻱ ﺳـــﺎﺧﺖ ﻳـــﻚ ﻻﻳـــﻪ ﺟﺪﻳـــﺪﺧﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺯﻣﻨـﻮﻱ‪ Layer / New /Layer‬ﻳـﺎ ﻛﻠﻴـﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﺭﻱ ‪ shift+ ctrl +N‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨـﻪ ‪Group‬‬

‫‪ with previous layer‬ﻓﻌـﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻻﻳـﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫»ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺒﺤﺚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪«.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷـﺪ ‪ .‬ﻻﻳـﻪ ﻓﻌـﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻻﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﺑﺎﻥ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Layers‬ﺗﻴﺮﻩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﻚ ﻻﻳﻪ‬

‫‪12‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﻚ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻣـﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮﺩﺭﭘﻨﺠـﺮﻩ‪ Layers‬ﺍﺯﻣﻨـﻮﻱ‪ Layer/Delete/layer‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﺓ ‪ Layers‬ﺭﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛﻠﻴـﻚ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺳـﺘﻮﺭ‪ Delete layer‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻴﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Layers‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪ .‬ﺁﻳﻜﻦ ﺳﻄﻞ ﺯﺑﺎﻟـﻪ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Layers‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Delete Linked layer‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﻻﻳﻪ ‪ Link‬ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻬﻢ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳـﺘﻮﺭ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺣـﺬﻑ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Delete Hidden layer‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺎﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠـﺮﻩ ‪ Layers‬ﺑـﺎ ﺩﺭﮒ ﻛـﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Layer/Arrange‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻴﻌﺖ ﻻﻳـﻪ ﻫـﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺎﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Alt‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻣﺬﺑﻮﺭﻛﭙﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Layers‬ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬ﺩﺭﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﺮﻛﺮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺪ ﻛﻠـﻲ ﺗـﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻳـﺎ ﻻﻳـﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Opacity‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ‪.‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Fill‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻻﻳـﻪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Lock‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴـﺮﺍﺕ ﻣـﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨــﺎﺭ ﻻﻳــﻪ ﻫــﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠــﺮﻩ‬ ‫‪ Layers‬ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻲ ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ‪Indicates layer‬‬

‫‪ visibility‬ﺗﻮﺳــﻂ ﺍﻳــﻦ ﻧﻤــﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗـﻮﺍﻥ ﻻﻳـﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻨﻬـﺎﻥ ﻳـﺎ‬ ‫ﺁﺷﻜﺎﺭ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺳـﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨـﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻛﻠﻴـﻚ ﻣـﻲ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻲ ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻧﺠﻴﺮﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ‪ Indicates if layer is linked‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻓﻌـﺎﻝ ﺑـﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻻﻳـﻪ ﭘﻴﻮﻧـﺪ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺎﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﻔـﻞ ﺷـﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫‪13‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑـــﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴـــﺮ ﺳـــﺎﻳﺰ ﻻﻳـــﻪ ﻓﻌـــﺎﻝ ﻣـــﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴـــﺪ ﺑﻌـــﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـــﺎﺏ ﺍﺑـــﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Move‬ﺩﺭﻧـــﻮﺍﺭ‪ Options‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨـــﻪ‬ ‫‪ Show Bounding Box‬ﺭﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﻮﺳـﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ‪.‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣـﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨـﻮﻱ ‪ Edit/free Transform‬ﻳـﺎ ﻛﻠﻴـﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ Ctrl +T‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ‪Edit /Transform‬‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ‪ : Scale‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﻻﻳﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ‪ : Rotate‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﻻﻳﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬ـ ‪ : Skew‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻻﻳﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٤‬ـ ‪ : Distort‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺎﺑﻪ ﺟﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟـﻲ ﺍﻃـﺮﺍﻑ ﻻﻳـﺔ ﻓﻌـﺎﻝ ﺑـﻪ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٥‬ـ ‪ : Perspective‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺮﺳﭙﻜﺘﻴﻮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮔﺮﻩ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟـﻲ ﺍﻃـﺮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﻻﻳﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻗﺮﻳﻨﺔ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٦‬ـ ‪ : ْRotate 180‬ﻻﻳﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻣﻲ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٧‬ـ ‪ : Rotate 90 CW‬ﻻﻳﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﻲ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٨‬ـ ‪ : Rotate 90 CCW‬ﻻﻳﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﻲ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٩‬ـ ‪ : Flip Horizontal‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻻﻳﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻗﺮﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١٠‬ـ ‪ : Flip Vertical‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻻﻳﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻗﺮﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١١‬ـ ‪ : Again‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ shift + ctrl + T‬ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ‪Transform‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‪ :‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻼ ﻧﻴﺰ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻻﻳﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻤـﺎ ﺩﺍﺧـﻞ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺍﺑـﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ‪ Option‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﻴﻚ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫـﺎ ﻛﻠﻴـﻚ ﻛـﺮﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Apply‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Layer‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻴﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﺓ ‪ Layers‬ﻛﻤﻚ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ : Merge Down‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻻﻳـﺔ ﻓﻌـﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺎ ﻻﻳـﺔ ﺯﻳـﺮﻳﻦ ﺧـﻮﺩ ﺍﺩﻏـﺎﻡ ﻣـﻲ ﻛﻨـﺪ ﻛﻠﻴـﺪ ﻣﻌـﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ ctrl + E‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪14‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ : Merge Visible‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺷﻜﺎﺭ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑـﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﻢ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ shift + ctrl + E‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ : Flatten Image‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﻋﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﺷﻜﺎﺭ ﻭ ﭘﻨﻬـﺎﻥ ﺑـﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﻢ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ‪ Back ground‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺗﻚ ﺗﻚ ﻻﻳـﻪ ﻫـﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﺷـﺪ ﭼـﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ‪PHOTO SHOP‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Photoshop‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ TYPE‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧـﮓ ﻓﻌـﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ‪Foreground‬‬

‫‪ color‬ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪ .‬ﻣﺘﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣـﻲ ﺷـﻮﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﻛﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ‪ T‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Layer‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﻨـﺪﻩ ﻻﻳـﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ‪ Photoshop‬ﻣﺘﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ ١‬ـ ﻣﺘﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﻫﻨﺮﻱ ‪ ٢ ، Artistic‬ـ ﻣﺘﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻓﻲ ‪Paragraph‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ‪ Artistic‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳـﺒﺘﺮ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻭ ﻗﺎﻟـﺐ ‪ Paragraph‬ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠـﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‪Horizontal type tool‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‪Vertical type tool‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‪Horizontal type mask tool‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﺤﺎﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫـﺪ ﺷـﺪ ﻗـﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ‪ selection‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ‪ selection‬ﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‪Vertical type mask tool‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ‪ selection‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ‪ selection‬ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Type mask‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴـﺪ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Brush Tool‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪15‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭘﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Open‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗـﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ‪ select‬ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Copy‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Edit‬ﻳﻚ ﻛﭙﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣـﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Edit‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Past in to‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺑﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Free Transform‬ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪Ctrl +‬‬

‫‪ T‬ﺍﺯﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Edit‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻳﻚ ﻻﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ‪ Mask‬ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﺓ ‪ Layer‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪Options‬‬

‫‪: Change the text organization .١‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻋﻜﺲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪: Set the font family .٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪: Set the font style .٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺭﺏ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﭘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺨﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪: Set the font size .٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪: Set the anti aliased method .٥‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺮﻣﻲ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪: Left Align Text , center Align Text , Right Align Text .٦‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﺮﺍﺯﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﺘﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪: Set the text color .٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪: Set warped text .٨‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪: Toggle the character and paragraph pallets .٩‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻓﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑـﻪ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﺘﻦ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺖ ﻋﻤﺪﻩ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺘﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﺎﺭ‬

‫‪16‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Free transform‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Edit‬ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ Ctrl + T‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻـﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴـﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Layer‬ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻻﻳـﻪ ﻣـﺘﻦ ﻧﻮﺷـﺘﻪ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﻋﻼﻣـﺖ ‪ T‬ﺑـﻪ ﭼـﺸﻢ ﻣـﻲ ﺧـﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫‪ Dobell click‬ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻻﻳـﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑـﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻻﻳـﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘـﻮﺭ ‪ Layer / Raster / Layer‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔـﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺣـﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Photoshop‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺳﺎﺯ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛـﻪ ﻣـﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺳﺎﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Photoshop‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌـﺎﻝ ﻛـﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‪ Text‬ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ Font‬ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪ Paste‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺸﻲ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Blur Tool‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪R‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﺎﺑﻪ ﺟﺎ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻴﺰ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺒﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪Option‬‬ ‫‪ :Brush .١‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﻧﻮﻙ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Brush‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ :Mode .٢‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Strength .٣‬ﺷﺪﺕ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Sharpen Tool‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪R‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Blur‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﻴﺰﻱ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻠﻬﺎ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺁﺷﻜﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻤﺮﻧﮓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟـﻪ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﻴﺪ ﻛـﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﻧﺎﻫﻨﺠﺎﺭﻳﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Smudge Tool‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪R‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪﻭﺩﻱ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﻧﺮﻡ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻭ ﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻨﻨـﺪﮔﻲ ﻧﻴـﺰ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺟﺎﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﺓ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Option‬‬ ‫‪ :Strength .١‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Smudge‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨـﻪ ﺑﻴـﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‬

‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪17‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫‪ :Finger paint .٢‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﺎﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﻧـﮓ ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧـﮓ ﭘـﻴﺶ ﺯﻣﻴﻨـﻪ ﺭﺳـﻢ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Smudge‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨـﺔ ‪ Finger painting‬ﻓﻌـﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻘـﺪﺍﺭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨـﺔ‬ ‫‪ Strength‬ﻧﻴﺰ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Brush Tool‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻣـﻮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤـﻞ ﺭﻧـﮓ‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻴﺰﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Blur Tool . Sharpen Tool. Smudge Tool‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺔ ‪ Use All Layer‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﻤـﺎﻡ ﻻﻳـﻪ ﻫـﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Dodge Tool‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪O‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑـﺰﺍﺭ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷـﻦ ﻧﻤـﻮﺩﻥ ﻗـﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗـﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪Option‬‬ ‫‪ :Range .١‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Dodge‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ‪ Shadow ،‬ﺗﻴﺮﻩ ﻭ ﺳـﺎﻳﻪ ﺩﺍﺭ ‪ Mid tones ،‬ﺭﻧﮕﻬـﺎﻱ‬

‫ﻣﻴﺎﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺘﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ‪ Highlights ،‬ﭘﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Exposure .٢‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Burn Tool‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪O‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Sponge Tool‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪O‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪Option‬‬ ‫‪ :Mode .١‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ Desaturate‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ Saturate‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺷـﺒﺎﻉ‬

‫ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Flow .٢‬ﺷﺪﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Sponge‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻭ ﻋﻜﺴﻬﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴـﺪ ﻳـﻚ ﻋﻜـﺲ‬ ‫ﻗﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﻭ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﮕﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ‬

‫‪18‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺏ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴـﺪ ﺑـﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘـﻲ ﻳـﻚ ﻋﻜـﺲ‬ ‫ﻗﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﻭ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻨﻚ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ‪ Grayscale‬ﺑﻪ ‪ RGB‬ﻳﺎ ‪ CMYK‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ‪(Image / Mode) .‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Brush Tool‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺻﺎﻑ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺳـﺎﻳﻪ ﺩﺍﺭ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻤـﻮﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗـﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺠـﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪Option‬‬ ‫‪ :Brush‬ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻮﻙ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻗﻠﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﭘﻴـﺪﺍ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬

‫ﻛﻨﻴـــﺪ ﺑـــﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺜﻠـــﺚ ‪ Brush‬ﻛﻠﻴـــﻚ ﻛﻨﻴـــﺪ ﻣﻨـــﻮﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳـــﺮ ‪ Brush‬ﺑـــﺎﺯ ﻣـــﻲ ﺷـــﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻗـــﺴﻤﺖ‬ ‫‪ Master diameter‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﻧـﻮﻙ ﻗﻠـﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈـﻴﻢ ﻛـﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻨـﻮﻱ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻗﻠﻤﻬﺎ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Brush‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻳـﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴـﺪ‬ ‫ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻗﻠﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺜﻠـﺚ ﻓـﺮﺍﻣﻴﻦ ﺑـﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﺳـﺘﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪ New Brush‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Rename Brush‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣـﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Delete Brush‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﻚ ﻗﻠـﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴـﺴﺖ ‪Brush‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ )‪(Brush‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗـﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣـﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈـﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤـﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨـﻮﻱ‬ ‫‪ Edit/Define Brush‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪ Brush‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ Ok‬ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﻠﻢ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Brush tool‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ Brush‬ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺫﺧﻴـﺮﺓ ﻗﻠـﻢ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Brush‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻴﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Save Brush‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪19‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫) ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ Foreground‬ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪(.‬‬ ‫‪ :Mode‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺪ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﯽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺁﻣﻴﺰﯼ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﮏ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪.٢‬‬

‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻪ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ‬ ‫‪ .۱‬ﺭﻧﮓ ‪Blend‬‬

‫‪ .۲‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ‪Master Color‬‬

‫‪ .۳‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ‪Result Color‬‬

‫‪ .۱‬ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ : Blend‬ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻢ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .۲‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ‪ : Master Color‬ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨـﻪ ﮐـﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .۳‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ‪ : Result Color‬ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺪﻫﺎﯼ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﯽ‬ ‫‪.۱‬‬

‫‪ :Normal‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﯽ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻳﮑﻨﻮﺍﺧـﺖ ﭘﻮﺷـﻴﺪﻩ‬

‫‪20‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬

‫‪ :Dissolve‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﻄﺢ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻠﻬﺎﯼ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﯼ ﭘﺮﺍﮐﻨﺪﻩ‪.‬‬

‫‪.٣‬‬

‫‪ :Behind‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺎﺭﯼ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﯼ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﮐـﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪.٤‬‬

‫‪ :Clear‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺎﺭﯼ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﯼ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪ ﺗﺮﺳـﻴﻤﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﭘﺎﮎ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪.٥‬‬

‫‪ :Darken‬ﺍﺳــﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳ ـﻦ ﻣــﺪ ﺗﺮﺳ ـﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺟــﺐ ﭘﻮﺷــﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺷــﺪﻥ ﺳــﻄﺢ ﺗــﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑــﺎ ﻳ ـﮏ ﻻﻳ ـﻪ ﺭﻧﮕــﯽ‬ ‫ﻣــﯽ ﺷــﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔــﺮ ﺭﻧــﮓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨــﺎﺑﯽ ﻳ ـﮏ ﺭﻧــﮓ ﺗﻴ ـﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ ﺳــﻄﺢ ﺗــﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺎﻧﻨــﺪ ﻳ ـﮏ ﺷﻴ ـﺸﻪ ﺭﻧﮕــﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﺪ ﻭﻟﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﺁﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﯼ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫‪.٦‬‬

‫‪ :Multiply‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﯽ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻳﮏ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ﺗﻴﺮﻩ ﺗـﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻧـﮓ ‪ Blend‬ﺑـﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﯼ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﯽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻴﺮﻩ ﺗﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﯼ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪.٧‬‬

‫‪ :Color Burn‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﮐﯽ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺪ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﯽ ‪ multiply‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ ﻗـﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﯼ ﺗﻴـﺮﻩ ﺗـﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻴﺮﻩ ﺗﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪.٨‬‬

‫‪ :Linear Burn‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﯽ ﻳﮏ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ Blend‬ﺭﻭﯼ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪Color Burn‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪.٩‬‬

‫‪ :Lighten‬ﺍﻳــﻦ ﻣــﺪ ﺗﺮﺳــﻴﻤﯽ ﺑــﺎ ﺗﻮﺟــﻪ ﺑــﻪ ﺭﻧــﮓ ‪ Blend‬ﺳــﻄﺢ ﭘﻴﮑــﺴﻠﻬﺎﯼ ﺗﻴــﺮﻩ ﺗــﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪.١٠‬‬

‫‪ :Screen‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ ﭘﻴﮑـﺴﻠﻬﺎﯼ ﺗﻴـﺮﻩ ﺗـﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻭ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻠﻬﺎﯼ ﺗﻴﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺘﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺁﻣﻴﺰﯼ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﭘﻴﮑـﺴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑـﺎ ﺗﻮﺟـﻪ ﺑـﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ Blend‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺘﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪.١١‬‬

‫‪ :Color Doge‬ﺍﻳــﻦ ﻣــﺪ ﺗﺮﺳــﻴﻤﯽ ﺑــﺎ ﺗﻮﺟــﻪ ﺑــﻪ ﺭﻧــﮓ ‪ Blend‬ﺑﺎﻋــﺚ ﺭﻭﺷــﻦ ﺷــﺪﻥ ﭘﻴﮑــﺴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﯽ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮﯼ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﯼ ﺗﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪.١٢‬‬

‫‪ :Linear Dodge‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺪ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﯽ ‪ Color Dodge‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭﻟﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺪﺕ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪.١٣‬‬

‫‪ :Overlay‬ﺍﻳ ـﻦ ﻣــﺪ ﺗﺮﺳ ـﻴﻢ ﺑــﺎ ﺗﻮﺟــﻪ ﺑــﻪ ﺭﻧــﮓ ‪ Blend‬ﻳ ـﮏ ﻻﻳــﻪ ﺭﻧﮕــﯽ ﺑــﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺗــﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻳﺠــﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻠﻬﺎﯼ ﺗﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪.١٤‬‬

‫‪ :Soft Light‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﮑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ Blend‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻧـﮓ ﺗـﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﮑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﻴﺮﻩ ﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺗﻴﺮﻩ ﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪.١٥‬‬

‫‪ :Hard Light‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪ Soft Light‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪.١٦‬‬

‫‪ :Vivid Light‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ Blend‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪21‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫‪.١٧‬‬

‫‪ :Linear Light‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪ Vivid Light‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﻴﺖ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪.١٨‬‬

‫‪ :Pin Light‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﻲ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪.١٩‬‬

‫‪ :Difference‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﻛﻴـﺐ ﺭﻧـﮓ ‪ Blend‬ﻭ ﺭﻧﮕﻬـﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟـﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗـﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺁﻣﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪.٢٠‬‬

‫‪ :Exclusion‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪ Difference‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺻﺪ ﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣـﺪ ﺗﺮﺳـﻴﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺁﻣﻴﺰﻱ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Hue‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﻲ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ Blend‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﺗﻮﺟـﻪ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﻴﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﻣﻘـﺪﺍﺭ‬

‫‪.٢١‬‬

‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻴﺮﻩ ﮔﻲ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺪ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﻲ ‪ Hue‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢٢‬‬

‫‪ :Saturation‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ Blend‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪.٢٣‬‬

‫‪ :Color‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﻲ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ Blend‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪ ﺗﺮﺳـﻴﻤﻲ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺧﺎﻛﺴﺘﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗـﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Luminosity‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ Blend‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪.٢٤‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‪ :‬ﻣﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Brush Tool‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻧﻴـﺰ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺪ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Photoshop‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Opacity .٣‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ Blend‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Flow .٤‬ﺷﺪﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Brush‬ﺭﺍﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Set to enable airbrush capabilities .٥‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺁﻣﻴﺰﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﭘﺨـﺶ ﺭﻧـﮓ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺁﻣﻴﺰﻱ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﭙﺮﻱ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺁﻣﻴﺰﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺑـﻪ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﺭ ﻳﻜﻨﻮﺍﺧﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Gradient Tool‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ‪G‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺁﻣﻴﺰﻱ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻮﺍﻧﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻃﻴﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺁﻣﻴﺰﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺑﻬﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭﻳﻚ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﺟﺎﻧﺸﻴﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ‪ Options‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺪ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺁﻣﻴـﺰﻱ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ )ﺧﻄﻲ ‪) ,( Linear‬ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺍﻱ‪) ,( Radial‬ﻣﺨﺮﻭﻃﻲ ‪) ,( Conical‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳـﻪ ﺍﻱ‪) ,( Angle‬ﻗﺮﻳﻨـﻪ ﺍﻱ‪,( Reflect‬‬

‫)ﻣﻜﻌﺒﻲ‪ (Diamond‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Options‬‬

‫‪22‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫‪: Reverse : ١‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻋﻜﺲ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪: Dither : ٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺁﻣﻴﺰﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎﹰ ﻧﺎ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺳﻲ ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﻧـﮓ ﺍﻳﺠـﺎﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫـﺪ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪: Transparency : ٣‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﺗﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫـﺎ ﻭ ﻳـﺎ ﻳـﻚ ﻣـﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋـﻪ ﺩﺳـﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ‪ Layer / Layer style‬ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼﹰ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ Effect Drop shadow‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ‪ Effect‬ﺑـﻪ ﻻﻳـﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻓﻜﺖ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻﹰ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴـﺮ ﻧﻴـﺰ ﻣـﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Photoshop‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻓﻜﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺟﺎﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒـﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺍﻓﻜﺖ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍﻓﻜﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Drop shadow, Inner shadow, Outer glow, Color overlay, Gradient overlay, Pattern overly, Stroke.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻓﻜﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Layer‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Opacity‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻳـﺎ ﺷـﻔﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺍﻓﻜﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Fill‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻻﻳـﻪ ﻫـﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺷـﻔﺎﻑ ﻣـﻲ ﻛﻨـﺪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﻱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻓﻜﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪23‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ‪: Layer style‬‬ ‫‪: Copy layer style .١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻛﭙﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻜﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Paste layer style .٢‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﻓﻜﺖ ﻛﭙﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪: Paste layer style to linked .٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ) ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ ( Linked‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻓﻜﺖ ﻛﭙﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫـﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪: Clear layer style .٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻓﻜﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪: Global light .٥‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺒـﺪﺃ ﻣـﺸﺨﺺ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻱ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻓﻜﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﻨﺠﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪: Create layer .٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻓﻜﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪: Hide all effects .٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺷﻜﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﻓﻜﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪: Scale effects .٨‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻓﻜﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﺩﺍﺩ ) ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ‪ Effect‬ﺑﻪ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ( ‪.‬‬

‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﻳﺎ ‪Pattern‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ‪ Feather‬ﺻﻔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺑﻲ ﺣﺘﻤـﺎﹰ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺑـﺎ ﺍﺑـﺰﺍﺭ‬

‫‪ Rectangle‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Edit‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Define pattern‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬

‫‪24‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪Photoshop‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Crop Tool‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪C‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺮﺵ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺍﺑـﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ‪ Select‬ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺍﺧـﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺩﺍﺑﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ‪ Option‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﻴﻚ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ ﻭ ﻳـﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨـﻮﻱ ‪ Image‬ﺩﺳـﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Crop‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪History Brush Tool‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳـﻞ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜـﻲ ﺩﺭ ‪ Photoshop‬ﺑـﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑـﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻓﺎﻳـﻞ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ History‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑـﺎﺯ ﻛـﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ History‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Window‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ History‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻴﻦ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ History‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳـﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﻬـﺎﻱ ﺑﻌـﺪﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻴـﺴﺖ ‪ Cancel‬ﻳـﺎ ﻃﻮﺳـﻲ ﺭﻧـﮓ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺳﻄﻞ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻥ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑـﺰﺍﺭ‪ History Brush Tool‬ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴـﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋـﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﺤﻮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‪Art History Brush Tool‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻬﻢ ﺭﻳﺨﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻨﺮﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔـﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗـﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Style‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ ﻣﻴﻜﻨـﻴﻢ ﺑـﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﺎﺳﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ‪Selection‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪Q‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Photoshop‬ﺩﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ ١‬ـ ‪Edit in standard mode‬‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ـ ‪Edit in quick mask mode‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪ Mode select‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺪ ‪ standard‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫـﺎﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ Magic wand , Marquee‬ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ‪ Selection‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺤـﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻫـﺎﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ‪ Edit in quick mask mode‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻳـﻚ ﻣﺎﺳـﻚ ﺑـﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ‪ Select‬ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﺘﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻨﻔﺶ ﺩﻳـﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫـﺪ ﺷـﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨـﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻄﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Brush‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺧﻄﻮﻃﻲ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻣﺤﻮﻃﻪ ﻣﺎﺳﻚ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺖ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺠـﺎﻡ ﺷـﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ‪ Select‬ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ‬

‫‪25‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻲ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻛﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺑـﻪ ﺳـﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ Mode quick mask‬ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺖ ‪ Standard mode‬ﺑﺮﮔـﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻲ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﻇـﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨـﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﺳﻚ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ‪ Selection‬ﺑﺎ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻭ ﻟﻄﺎﻓﺖ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ Quick mask‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻤﺎﹰ ﻳﻚ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ Select‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Slice Tool‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪K‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑـﺮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻫـﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ Web‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺑـﺮﺵ ﻗـﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠـﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ File / Save for web‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺗﻌﻴـﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Save‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣـﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺣﺘﻤﺎﹰ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻨﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﺭﺻـﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ web‬ﻓﺮﻣـﺖ ﻳـﺎ ﭘـﺴﻮﻧﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ‬ ‫‪ HTML‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ‪ Folder‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ‪ Image‬ﺍﻳﺠـﺎﺩ ﻣـﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﻛـﻪ‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ‪ Folder‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‪ Slice Select Tool‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪K‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‪ Healing Brush Tool‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪J‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻛـﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﺠـﺪﺩﺍﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻧـﮓ ﺯﻣﻴﻨـﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ‪ Options‬ﺩﺭﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Sure‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ Sample‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Alt‬ﻭ ‪ Drag‬ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣـﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ Pattern‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫـﺎﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒـﻞ ﺁﻣـﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‪ Patch Tool‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪J‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺮ ﻛـﺮﺩﻥ ﻗـﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ .‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﭘﺮ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺑـﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ‪Options‬‬

‫‪ : ١‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ Sure‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﭘﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﻭﻟـﻲ ﺍﮔـﺮ ‪ Destination‬ﻓﻌـﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‬

‫‪26‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺗﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ Use pattern‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫـﺎﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒـﻞ‬ ‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Color Replacement Tool‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪J‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‪ Pencil Tool‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪B‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺮ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻗﻠﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘـﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻧﮕﻬـﺎﻱ ﻛـﺎﻣﻼﹰ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﻜﺪﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺖ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﻄﺢ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺗﻚ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳـﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻢ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻭ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻃﺮﺣﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ‪Options‬‬

‫‪: Auto Eraser : ١‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Pencil‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺳـﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﻲ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺩ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﻲ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‪ : Clone Stamp Tool‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪S‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﭙﻲ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺣﺘﻤﺎﹰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Alt‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ Drag‬ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻛـﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴـﺪ ‪Alt‬‬

‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ : Pattern Stamp Tool‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪S‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ :Eraser Tool‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪E‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﻙ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ :Background Eraser Tool‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪E‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍﭘﺎﻙ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﻙ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺷﻄﺮﻧﺠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ :Magic Eraser Tool‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪E‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Magic wand‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﺎﺩﻭﻳﻲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﻛﻠﻴـﻚ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ ﻫﻤـﺎﻥ ﺭﻧـﮓ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪27‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ :Paint Bucket Tool‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪G‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺁﻣﻴﺰﻱ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﺑـﺰﺍﺭ ‪Magic wand‬‬

‫ﺷﺒﺎﻫﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ :Pen Tool‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪P‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Photo shop‬ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧـﺪ ﻣـﻮﺭﺩ ﻭﻳـﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻗـﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘـﻪ ﻭ ﻳـﻚ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ‪ Path‬ﻳﺎ ﻣـﺴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻧــﻮﺍﺭ ‪ Option‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨــﻪ ‪ Shape layer‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌــﺎﻝ ﻛﻨــﻴﻢ ﻫــﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Paths‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺑـﺼﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ :Freeform Pen Tool‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪P‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Add Anchor Point Tool‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﻩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Delete Anchor Point Tool‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮔﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Convert Point Tool‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‪:‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﺭﻧﮕﻬـﺎﻱ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﭘﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ‪ Option‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Style‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠـﺎﻡ ﻣـﻲ ﺩﻫـﻴﻢ ‪ .‬ﺍﮔـﺮ ﺩﺍﺧـﻞ ﻣـﺴﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﺠـﺎﺩ ﺷـﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪ Right click‬ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪: Delete path : ١‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ : Define custom : ٢‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺷﻴﻮ ‪ Shape‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳـﺘﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪: Make selection : ٣‬‬

‫‪28‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪: Fill path : ٤‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪: Stroke path : ٥‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﻚ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪: Free transform path : ٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ :Path Selection Tool‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪A‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ :Direct Selection Tool‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪A‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﮔﺮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Photoshop‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ‪) Vector‬ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ( ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ :Rectangle Tool‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪U‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ :Rounded Rectangle Tool‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪U‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺑﺎ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ :Ellipse Tool‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪U‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﻀﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ :Polygon Tool‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪U‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺿﻠﻌﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ :Line Tool‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪U‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺻﺎﻑ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺭﺏ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Custom Shape Tool‬‬

‫‪29‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‪ :‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪ Shape‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ‪ Option‬ﺍﮔﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ Shape Layers‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ‪ Shape‬ﺩﺭ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Paths‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ‪ Shape‬ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ)‪ (Path‬ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Fill Pixels‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ‪ Shape‬ﺍﺯ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ fore ground‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ‪ Shape‬ﻭ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ‪Custom Shape‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Pen‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Edit/Define Custom Shape‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ :Notes Tool‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪N‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻫـﺮ ﻻﻳـﻪ ﻳـﺎ ﺗﺮﺳـﻴﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ Type‬ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ‪ Note‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ‪ Right click‬ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Delete note‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ :Audio Annotation Tool‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪N‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻋﻤـﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺻـﻮﺭﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Eyedropper Tool‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪I‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Color Sampler Tool‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪I‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ‪ ۴‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺑـﺎ ﺍﻭﻟـﻴﻦ ﻛﻠﻴـﻚ ﺩﺭ ﺻـﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﻨﺠـﺮﻩ ‪ Info‬ﺑـﻪ ﻃـﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪ ‪ RGB‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Measure Tool‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪I‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑـﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ‬

‫‪30‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Measure‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﭼـﺮﺧﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴـﻴﻦ ﻛـﺮﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Image‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Rotate Canvas/Arbitrary‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ‪ Ok‬ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪VIEW‬‬ ‫‪Proof setup : ١‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳــﻦ ﺩﺳــﺘﻮﺭ ﺑــﺮﺍﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻳـﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑـﻪ‬ ‫ﭼﺎﭘﺨﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣـﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺗـﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻣـــﺪ ﺭﻧﮕـــﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﺪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ‪ Image / mode‬ﻭ ﻣﺪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‪ View / Proof setup‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ : Proof color : ٢‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪Ctrl + y‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ Proof setup‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ : Gamut warning : ٣‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪Shift + Ctrl + y‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﺪ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ RGB‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪: Zoom : ٤‬‬ ‫‪ ١‬ـ ‪ : Zoom in : ٤‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪Ctrl + +‬‬

‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ـ ‪ : Zoom out : ٤‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪Ctrl + -‬‬

‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ـ ‪ : Fit on screen : ٤‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪Ctrl + 0‬‬

‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٤‬ـ ‪ : Actual pixel : ٤‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪Ctrl + 0‬‬

‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٥‬ـ ‪: Print size : ٤‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺮﻳﻨﺘﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ : Extras : ٥‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ctrl + H‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Slice‬ﺑﺮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Extras‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺷﻜﺎﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Slice‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺷﻜﺎﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ‪ Select‬ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤـﺎ ﻧﻴﺰﻛـﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ‬

‫‪31‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪: Show : ٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻳﺎ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺷﻄﺮﻧﺠﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻏﻴـﺮﻩ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪: Rulers : ٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻳﺎ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪: Snap : ٨‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫‪: Snap to : ٩‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺷﻄﺮﻧﺠﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Slice‬ﻭ ﻛـﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪: Lock Guides : ١٠‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪: Clear Guides : ١١‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪: New Guides : ١٢‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Clear Slice :۱۳‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ‪ Slice‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻴﮕﻴﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪IMAGE‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪Mode‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺪ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫـﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑـﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﻴﻚ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺪﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Adjustment‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪Ctrl+L‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Levels .۱‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Auto level .۲‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪Shift + Ctrl + L‬‬

‫‪32‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ) ‪ ( Levels‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﻨﻈـﻴﻢ ﻣـﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻟﻢ ﻭ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻬﺘـﺮ ﻛـﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Auto Contrast .۳‬‬

‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Auto Color.۴‬‬

‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Curves .۵‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺸﻜﻠﻞ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠـﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻮﺳﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺳﻴﻨﻮﺳﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.۶‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Color Balance‬‬

‫‪.٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻭﺷﺪﺕ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﺿـﺎﻓﻪ ﺷـﻮﺩ‬ ‫‪Brightness & contrast‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺷﺮﻧﮓ ﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Hue saturation .۸‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪Ctrl + U‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ)‪ ، (Hue‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎ)‪ (Saturation‬ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ)‪ (Lightness‬ﺗـﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Hue‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Desaturate .۹‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪Shift+Ctrl+U‬‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻴﻒ ﺧﺎﻛﺴﺘﺮﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Replace Color.۱۰‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Selective Color .۱۱‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺔ ‪ C,M,Y,K‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Channel Mixer .۱۲‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺩﻫﻨـﺪﺓ ﺗـﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣـﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Gradient Map .۱۳‬‬

‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻃﻴﻒ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Photo Filter .۱۴‬‬

‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Shadow/Highlight .۱۵‬‬

‫‪33‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Invert .۱۶‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪Ctrl + I‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ )ﻧﮕﺎﺗﻴﻮ ﻋﻜﺎﺳﻲ (‬ ‫‪Equalize.۱۷‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Threshold .۱۸‬‬

‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﻣﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Posterize .۱۹‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﺮﻳﺰﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ Level‬ﺑﻴـﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻫﻤـﻮﺍﺭ ﺑـﻮﺩﻥ ﺗـﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Variations .۲۰‬‬

‫ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺘﻮﺷﺎﭖ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺭﻧﮓﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛـﺎﺩﺭ ﺑـﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ Original .‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﺻـﻠﻲ ﺗـﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ Current pick ،‬ﺭﻧـﮓ ﺟـﺎﺭﻱ ﺗـﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧـﺸﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ Shadows‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺭﻧﮓﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ Mid tones‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺭﻧﮓﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻴـﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑـﺎ ‪ Highlight‬ﺭﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ‪ Saturation‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ‪ Fine‬ﻭ ‪ Coarse‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ‪ Load‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ‪ AVA‬ﻓﺮﺧﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ‪ Save‬ﻣـﻲﺗـﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺭﻧﮓﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤـﻮﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻜـﺮﺩ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪Duplicate‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﭙﻲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪Apply Image‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺩﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻣـﺪ ﺭﻧﮕـﻲ ﻳﻜـﺴﺎﻥ ﻫـﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪Image size‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﻭ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗـﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Document size‬ﺳـﺎﻳﺰ ﺟﺪﻳـﺪﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣــﻲ ﻛﻨــﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻗــﺴﻤﺖ ‪Resolution‬‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴـﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺻـﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨـﻪ ‪Constrain proportion‬‬

‫‪34‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫ﻓﻌــــــــــﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷــــــــــﺪ ﻧــــــــــﺴﺒﺖ ﻃــــــــــﻮﻝ ﻭ ﻋــــــــــﺮﺽ ﺑﻬــــــــــﻢ ﻗﻔــــــــــﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑـﻴﻦ ﻃـﻮﻝ ﻭﻋـﺮﺽ ﻛـﺎﻣﻼﹰ‬ ‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪Canvas size‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺟﺪﻳـﺪ ﺍﻳﺠـﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪﺷﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺮﺧﻼﻑ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Image size‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣـﻲ ﻣﺎﻧـﺪ ﻭ ﻓﻘـﻂ ﺻـﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺎﻳﺰﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪Pixel Aspect Ratio‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪Rotate canvas‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺮﻳﻨﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪Trim‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ Canvas size‬ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﻲ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Trim‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪Revel all‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﻓﺎﻳـﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴـﺮ ﻛﻨـﺪ ﺗـﺎ ﺍﻧـﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪Trap‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭘﺮﻳﻨﺖ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺎﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮕﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻻﻳﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Trap‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪EDIT‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪Fade‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ‪ Fade‬ﺍﺿـﺎﻓﻪ ﻣـﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﻴﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺪ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﻲ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪Copy merge‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﭙـﻲ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺩﺳـﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪35‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪Past in to‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻼﹰ ‪ Cut‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Copy‬ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺤـﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺑﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻗـﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪Clear‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪Fill‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺮﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻻﻳـﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻌـــﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﺳـــﻂ ﻳـــﻚ ﺭﻧـــﮓ ﻳـــﺎ ﻳـــﻚ ﺍﻟﮕـــﻮ‬ ‫)‪(Pattern‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣـﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪Alt + Back‬‬

‫‪ space‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻻﻳـﻪ ﻓﻌـﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﻧـــﮓ ‪ground‬‬

‫‪ Fore‬ﭘـــﺮ ﻣـــﻲ ﻛﻨـــﺪ ﻭ‬

‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Ctrl + Back space‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‪,‬ﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ Back ground‬ﭘﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪Stroke‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺧﻄﻮﻃﻲ ﺑـﺎ‬ ‫ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛـﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺩﺳـﺘﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻢ ﺧﻄﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪Purge‬‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﻛﻤﺒﻮﺩ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪ Ram‬ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻳﻢ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑـﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨـﻪ ‪ Purge‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﺎﺣـﺪﻭﺩﻱ ﺳـﺮﻋﺖ ﺳﻴـﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓـﺰﺍﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪Layer‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪ New/Layer‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪Shift+Ctrl+N‬‬

‫‪36‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻻﻳـﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺎﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪New/Layer Set‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺸﻮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Layer‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪ New/Layer Via Copy‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪Ctrl + J‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪ New/Layer Via Cut‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪shift+Ctrl + J‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪Duplicate Layer‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪Layer Properties‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪New Fill Layer‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﻚ ﺭﻧﮓ ) ‪ ( Solid color‬ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﻃﻴـﻒ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭ) ‪ ( Gradient‬ﻳﺎ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻳﻲ ) ‪ ( Pattern‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗـﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺪ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﻴﺖ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪New adjustment layer‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻼ ﺩﺭ ‪ Image/Adjustment‬ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺍﻳﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬

‫‪37‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪Change layer content‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪layer content options‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪Type/Create Work Path‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ‪)Path‬ﻣﺴﻴﺮ(ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪Type/Convert To shape‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ‪ shape‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪Type/Horizontal & Vertical‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪Rasterize‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﻬـﺖ ﺗﺒـﺪﻳﻞ ﻻﻳـﻪ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﺠـﺎﺩ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺑـﻪ ﻳـﻚ ﻻﻳـﻪ ﻣﻌﻤـﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣـﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ Type‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ( )‪ Shape‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ‪ Shape‬ﺑﻪ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ( ﻭ‪...‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪New layer Based slice‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ slice‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪Add Layer Mask/Reveal all‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺳﻚ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺳﻚ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Gradient‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ‪ fade‬ﺩﺍﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪Add Layer Mask/Hide all‬‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺳﻚ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺳﻚ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪Add Layer Mask/Reveal Selection‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﺎﺳﻚ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪Add Layer Mask/Hide Selection‬‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﻣﺎﺳﻜﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪Remove Layer Mask/Discard‬‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﺎﺳﻚ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪38‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪Remove Layer Mask/Apply‬‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﺎﺳﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪Disable Layer Mask‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﺎﺳﻚ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪Enable Layer Mask‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﺎﺳﻚ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪Add Vector Mask/Reveal all‬‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ‪) Vector‬ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ (Shape‬ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺩﺳـﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Add vector Mask/Reveal all‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ ﻛـﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺁﺧﺮ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ‪ Shape‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪Enable/Disable Vector Mask‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺎﺳﻚ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ‪ Shape‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪ Create Clipping Mask‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ‪Ctrl+G‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺯﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻳـﻚ‬ ‫ﻻﻳﻪ ‪ Shape‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Path‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪ Release Clipping Mask‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ‪Shift+Ctrl+G‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ (Create Clipping Mask‬ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣـﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪Arrange‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪Align linked‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ) ﻫﻤﮕﺮﻭﻩ ‪ ( Linked‬ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ‪ Align‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﻢ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪Distribute linked‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻁ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣـﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪Lock all linked layer‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Linked‬ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪Matting‬‬

‫‪39‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺻـﻠﻲ ﺑـﻪ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ Defringe) .‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑـﺎ ﺗﻌﻴـﻴﻦ ﺿـﺨﺎﻣﺖ( ) ‪Remove black matt‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ) ‪ Remove white matt‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Action‬ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫‪Action‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﺴﺮﻱ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ‪Action‬ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻗـﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛـﻪ ﻣـﻲ ﺗـﻮﺍﻥ ﺑـﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﺳـﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Play selection‬ﺍﺯ ﭘـﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﭘﻨﺠـﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺩﺍﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛـﺮﺩﻥ ﻳـﻚ ﻣﺮﺣﻠـﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﺑـﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻓﺎﻳـﻞ ) ﺳـﺎﺧﺘﻦ‬ ‫‪( Action‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Action‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Create new set‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Action‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺜﻠـﺚ ﻓـﺮﺍﻣﻴﻦ ﺑـﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ New set‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ‪ Action‬ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Start new Action‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ New Action‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Name‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪ Action‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴـﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭﻗـﺴﻤﺖ‬ ‫‪ Set‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺔ ‪ Function keyboard‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌـﺎﺩﻝ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ‪Action‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ ok‬ﻣﻲ ﺯﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺤﺎﻡ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﻴﻢ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣـﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Action‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Stop playing recording‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ ﺗـﺎ ﻛﻠﻴـﻪ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ‪Action‬ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ File/Automate/Batch‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻴﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ‪ Folder‬ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻢ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪ Action‬ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪Photoshop‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺪ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ‪ CMYK‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻨـﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺗـﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻧﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Channels‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪ ‪ Grayscale‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪40‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻬـﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳـﻖ ﺗﻔـﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﺓ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻫـﺮ ﻛـﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬـﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌـﺪﺍﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻳﺰ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺍﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﺗﺮﺍﻡ )‪ (Grain‬ﻣـﻲ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﻭ ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻭ ﻃﺮﺡ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪).‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﺘـﺮ ‪Color‬‬

‫‪(Halftone‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Channels‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪ ,‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺁﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫـﺪ ﺷـﺪ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻃﻴﻒ ﺧﺎﻛﺴﺘﺮﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻧﻤـﻮﺩ )ﺗﻮﺳـﻂ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫـﺎﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﻲ ﻭ‪(...‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﺤﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Split Channels‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻴﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ , Channels‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑـﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻛﺴﺘﺮﻱ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻢ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ New Channel‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Channels‬ﻭ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻧـﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺭﻧـﮓ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﻛﺎﻧـﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻓــﺸﺮﺩﻥ ‪ Ok‬ﻛﺎﻧــﺎﻝ ﺟﺪﻳــﺪﻱ ﺍﻳﺠــﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ Grayscale‬ﺑـﻪ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﺎﻧـﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻮﺳـﻂ ﺩﺳـﺘﻮﺭ‬

‫‪Merge‬‬

‫‪ Channels‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻓـﺮﺍﻣﻴﻦ ﭘﻨﺠـﺮﻩ ‪Channels‬‬

‫ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻴﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Channels‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Delete Channels‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﭼﺎﭖ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ‪ C‬ﻭ ‪ M‬ﻭ ‪ Y‬ﻭ ‪ , K‬ﻓـﻴﻠﻢ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳـﺖ ﺯﻳﻨـﻚ ﺗﻬﻴـﻪ ﻣـﻲ ﻛﻨﻨـﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ‪ ۴‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻱ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻛـﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﻓـﻴﻠﻢ ﻭ ﺯﻳﻨـﻚ‬

‫‪41‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫ﺟﺪﺍ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪File‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪Browse‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ‪ Shift + Ctrl + O‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻱ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪ option‬ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ File Browser‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺁﻥ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ‪File Browser‬‬

‫ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﺻﻼﺣﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ ،‬ﭘﻬﻨﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﻝ ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ‪ Scroll Bar‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﻢ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ EXIF‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺨﻔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ‪ All‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ sort by‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ view by‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ‪ Rotate‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻧﮕﻪﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ‪ Alt‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺟﻬﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺯ ‪ Delete File‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ File Browser‬ﺍﺯﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Window‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺩﺭ ‪ Preview‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ : Open‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ‪ Drag & Drop‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬‫‪ : Select All‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﻮﺷﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬‫‪ : Deselect All‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬‫‪ : Rename‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ‪.‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪ : Batch Rename‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ‪.‬‬‫‪: Delete‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪ : Rotate 180‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺭﺍ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪ : Rotate 90 CW‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﻲ ﭼﺮﺧﺪ ‪.‬‬‫‪ : Rotate 90 CCW‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﻲ ﭼﺮﺧﺪ ‪.‬‬‫‪ : Reveal Location in Explorer‬ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ‪ Window‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬‫‪ : New Folder‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻮﻟﺪﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ‪ Untitled‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ، Large With Rank‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻫﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ‪ Rank‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ Right‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ‪ Clear Rank‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺣﺬﻑ‬

‫‪42‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﻧﺎﻡ ‪ Rank‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻲ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﺑﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﺎﻡ ‪ Rank‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻﹰ ﺑﻤﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺖ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ‪ File Browse‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ : Show in separate window‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ Browser‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ‪ Window‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻨﻮﻳﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺭﺍﻳﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺔ ‪Dock to‬‬

‫‪ Palette Well‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ : Expanded View-‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﺓ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮔﺮ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪Toggle‬‬

‫‪ Expanded View‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪: Open‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ‪.‬‬‫‪ : Select All‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬‫‪ : Deselect All‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬‫‪ : Rename‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ‪.‬‬‫‪ : Batch Rename‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ : Delete‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ‪.‬‬‫‪ : Clear Ranking‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ‪.‬‬‫‪ : New Folder‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻮﻟﺪﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬‫‪ : Show Folder‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﻮﻟﺪﺭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ‪.‬‬‫ْ‪ : Rotate 180-‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮْ‪ ١٨٠‬ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ : Rotate 90ْCW‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮْ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﻲ ﭼﺮﺧﺪ ‪.‬‬‫‪ : Rotate 90 CCW‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮْ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﻲ ﭼﺮﺧﺪ ‪.‬‬‫‪ : Small Thumbnail‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪ : Medium Thumbnail‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪..‬‬‫‪ : Large Thumbnail‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪ : Details‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ‪.‬‬‫‪ : Refresh Desktop View‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ‪ F5‬ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺯﺧﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ : Reveal Location in Explorer‬ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ‪ window‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪ : Export CaChe‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪ : Purge Cache-‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Revert‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪F12‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺘﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑـﺎ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪43‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪Place‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‪ *.Pdf‬ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪Import‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ *.Pdf‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳـﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻜﻨﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪Export/Path to Illustrator‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Illustrator‬ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ‪Automate‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪Automate/Batch‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻳﻚ ‪ Folder‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Batch‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ‪ Action‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪play‬‬

‫• ‪ :Set‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ‪ Action‬ﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ‪ Action‬ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ :Action‬ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ Action‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Source‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ :Choose‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Source‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺔ ‪ Folder‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ‪ Choose‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ :Override Action “Open “Commands‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ‪ Open‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ‪ Action‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Batch‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ :Include All Sub Folders‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ Action‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺑﺮ ﻓﻮﻟﺪﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻮﻟﺪﺭ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ :Suppress Color Profile Warning‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Destination‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ None‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪Save and Close‬‬

‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ Folder‬ﺍﺯ ‪ Choose‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬

‫‪44‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ Folder‬ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Override Action ” Save as “ commands‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ‪ Save as‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ‪ Action‬ﻧﺎﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻟﻄﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ File naming‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﻴﻠﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﻧﺎﻡ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ‪ Compatibility‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Errors‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺧﻄﺎﻳﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ‪ Action‬ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ‪ Stop For Errors‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪ Log errors to file‬ﺧﻄﺎﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ Text‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪Automate/PDF Presentation‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻮﻟﺪﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ PDF‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻭ ﭘـﺸﺖ‬ ‫ﺳﺮ ﻫﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪Automate/Create Droplet‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ‪ Action‬ﻳﻲ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻓﺘﻮﺷﺎﭖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺔ ‪ Create Droplet‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻳﻚ ‪ Action‬ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬ ‫‪ Save Droplet In‬ﺑﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺔ ‪ Choose‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ‪ Droplet‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ﺁﻥ ‪exe‬‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Set‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ‪Action‬ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Action‬ﻧﻮﻉ‪ Action‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Override Action Open Commands‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ‪ Open‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﺎﺩﻳﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Include All Sub Folders‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ Action‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻓﻮﻟﺪﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Suppress Color Profile Warning‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Destination‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ None‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪Save and Close‬‬

‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ Folder‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ‪ Choose‬ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺸﻌﺎﺏ ‪ exe‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Override Action “Save As” Commends‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺍﺭﺕ‬ ‫‪ Save as‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ‪ Action‬ﻧﺎﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ File Naming‬ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Compatibility‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Errors‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺧﻄﺎﻳﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ‪ Action‬ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ‬

‫‪45‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫‪ Stop For Errors‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺔ ‪ Log Errors To File‬ﺧﻄﺎﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺸﻌﺎﺏ ‪ Text‬ﺟﻬﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪Automate/Conditional Mode change‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ‪ Mode‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺍﺯ ‪ Conditional Mode Change‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺁﻥ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ‬ ‫ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Source Mode‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ‪ All‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ‪ None‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Target Mode‬ﺑﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Mode‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪Automate/Contact Sheet II‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻛﺘﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Source Folder‬ﺑﺎ ‪ Browse‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻮﻟﺪﺭ ﺣﺎﻭﻱ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ‪ Include All Sub Folders‬ﻓﻮﻟﺪﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪Document‬‬

‫‪ :Width‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Height‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Resolution‬ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Mode‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Flatten All Layers‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻳﻜﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Place‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺩﺭ ‪ Thumbnails‬ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﭼﻴﺪﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Columns‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Rows‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺩﻳﻒﻫﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ : Use File Name As Caption‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ‪ Caption‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Font‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Size Font‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ‪ Ok‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ‪ Sheet‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ‪ Contact Sheet‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ‪ Sheet‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺷﺪ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪ Sheet‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪﻱ ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ Thumbnail‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻛﭙﻲ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪Automate/Crop and Straighten Photos‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ‪ Action‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺵ ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻮﻟﺪﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪46‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪Automate/Fit Image‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ‪ Pixels‬ﺍﺯ ‪ Fit Image‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪Automate/Multi-Page PDF to PSD‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ PDF‬ﺑﻪ ‪ PSD‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺁﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Choose‬ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ‪ Source‬ﻭ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Page Range‬ﺑﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺔ ‪ All‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺔ ‪ From / to‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪Output Options‬‬

‫‪ Resolution‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺑﺮﻭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Mode‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Anti-aliased‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﺮﻣﻲ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Destination‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﭼﻪ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ‪ Base name‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ‬ ‫‪ Choose‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﺓ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺔ ‪ Suppress warnings‬ﺍﺭﺗﻜﺎﺏ ﺧﻄﺎ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪Automate/Picture Package‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭼﻴﺪﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻮﻟﺪﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﻛﭙﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Source‬ﺑﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Use‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ‪ All subfolder‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﻟﺪﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ Folder‬ﺩﺭ ‪ Source‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪Document‬‬

‫‪ :Page Size‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Layout‬ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Resolution‬ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺎﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪47‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫‪ :Mode‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Flatten All Layers‬ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Label‬ﺍﺯ ‪ Contact‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ ‪ None‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ Custom text‬ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‪ Font ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﻠﻢ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫‪ Color ، Font size‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﻠﻢ‪،‬‬ ‫‪Opacity‬‬

‫ﺷﻔﺎﻓﻴﺖ‬

‫‪،‬‬

‫‪Position‬‬

‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‪ Rotate ،‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳــﺘﻮﺭ ‪Automate/Web‬‬ ‫‪Photo Gallery‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ‪ web‬ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺔ ‪ Web Photo gallery‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ :Style‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﺒﻚ ‪ Web page‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ :E-Mail‬ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ :Extension‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻧﺸﻌﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ :Browse‬ﻣﺴﻴﺮﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ :Include All Subfolder‬ﻓﻮﻟﺪﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ :Destination‬ﻣﻘﺼﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ‪ Web page‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ :Option‬ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪option‬ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Option‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺔ ‪ Banner‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Web Photo gallery‬ﺩﻳﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ : Site Name‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫• ‪ : Photographer‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻋﻜﺎﺱ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﺮﻣﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬

‫‪48‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪Photoshop‬‬

‫‪www.ariya3d.com‬‬

‫• ‪ : Contact Info‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫• ‪ : Date‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫• ‪ : Font‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﻠﻢ‬ ‫• ‪ : Font Size‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ‪ ، Option‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺔ ‪ Large Image‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬ ‫• ‪ :Resize Images‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﻳﺰﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫‪custom‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﻴﻠﺪ ﻛﻨﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ :Constrain‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ ،‬ﭘﻬﻨﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺎﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ :JPG Quality‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ : File Size‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬ ‫• ‪ :Border Size‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ :Title use‬ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ : Font‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﻠﻢ‬ ‫• ‪ :Font Size‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Title‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ‪ Option‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ‪ Ok‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﻟﺪﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺗﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻚ ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﻛﭙﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺎﻟﺮﻱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ‪ Photo gallery‬ﺩﺭ ‪ Microsoft internet explorer‬ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻋﻜﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺔ ‪ thumbnails‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬

‫‪Size‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫• ‪ :Columns‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ )ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ( ﺁﻥﻫﺎﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ :Rows‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺭﺩﻳﻔﻬﺎ )ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ( ﺁﻥﻫﺎﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬

‫‪Border size‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﻛﺎﺩﺭﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫• ‪Title used‬ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ Font‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻭ ‪ font size‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ :Custom Colors‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﮔﺎﻟﺮﻱ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻦ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ‪ Web Gallery‬ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪Automate/Photo merge‬‬

‫‪49‬‬

‫‪Adobe Photoshop‬‬

тАл╪зя║│я║Шя╗о╪пя╗│я╗о ╪зя╗зя╗┤я╗дя╗┤я║╕я╗ж ╪в╪▒я╗│я║ОтАм

тАля║Яя║░я╗ня╗й тАкPhotoshopтАмтАм

тАлтАкwww.ariya3d.comтАмтАм

тАля╗гя╗Мя║оя╗Уя╗▓ я╗гя╗ия╗оя╗▒ тАкFilterтАмтАм тАля║Ня║п я╗гя║ая╗дя╗оя╗Ля╗к я║йя║│я║Шя╗оя║ня║Ня║Х я║Ня╗│я╗ж я╗гя╗ия╗о я║Ся║оя║Ня╗▒ я║Ня╗│я║ая║Оя║й я║Яя╗ая╗оя╗й я╗ля║Оя╗▒ я╗гя║ия║Шя╗ая╗Т я║Ся║о я║ня╗ня╗▒ я║Чя║╝я║Оя╗ня╗│я║о я╗│я║О я╗гя║дя║кя╗ня║йя║У я║Ня╗зя║Шя║ия║Оя║Ся╗▓ я║Ня║│я║Шя╗Фя║Оя║йя╗й я╗г┘Ая╗▓ я║╖┘Ая╗оя║й тАк .тАмя║Ня╗Ыя║Ь┘Ая║отАм тАля║Ня╗│я╗ж я║йя║│я║Шя╗оя║ня║Ня║Х я║Ся║о я║ня╗ня╗▒ я║Чя║╝я║Оя╗ня╗│я║оя╗▒ я╗Ыя╗к я╗гя║к я║ня╗зяоХя╗▓ тАк CMYKтАмя║йя║Ня║╖я║Шя╗к я║Ся║Оя║╖я╗ия║к я╗Пя╗┤я║о я╗Уя╗Мя║Оя╗Э я║Ня║│я║Ц янШя║▓ я║Ся╗мя║Шя║о я║Ня║│я║Ц я╗гя║к я║ня╗зяоХ┘Ая╗▓ я║Ч┘Ая║╝я║Оя╗ня╗│я║о я║йя║нтАм тАля╗ля╗ияоХя║Оя╗б я║Ня║│я║Шя╗Фя║Оя║йя╗й я║Ня║п я╗Уя╗┤я╗ая║Шя║оя╗ля║О тАк RGBтАмя║Ся║Оя║╖я║ктАк.тАмтАм

тАл╪зя║│я║Шя╗о╪пя╗│я╗о ╪зя╗зя╗┤я╗дя╗┤я║╕я╗ж ╪в╪▒я╗│я║ОтАм тАл ┘И ╪з ╪з╪╣ ╪з ) тАк ╪МтАм┘Д тАк ╪М ╪МтАм╪▒ ┘ИтАк(...тАмтАм

тАл╪вя╗гя╗о╪▓╪┤ я║Яя║Оя╗гя╗К ╪зя╗зя╗┤я╗дя╗┤я║╕я╗ж тАк ╪МтАмяоФя║о╪зя╗Уя╗┤я╗Ъ тАк ╪МтАмя║Чя║к┘Ия╗│я╗ж ┘ИтАк ╪М ...тАм╪п╪зя╗зя╗ая╗о╪п я╗Ыя║О╪▒я║Чя╗оя╗зя╗мя║О┘К я╗Ыя╗оя║Чя║О┘З тАк ╪МтАм╪п╪зя╗зя╗ая╗о╪п янШя╗╝яоФя╗┤я╗ия╗мя║О┘КтАм тАля╗гя║ия║Шя╗ая╗Т тАк ╪МтАм╪вя║зя║оя╗│я╗ж ╪зя║зя║Тя║О╪▒ ╪зя╗зя╗┤я╗дя╗┤я║╕я╗ж ┘И я╗ля║░╪з╪▒╪з┘Ж я║Ся║оя╗зя║Оя╗гя╗к я╗гя║Шя╗Мя║к╪п ╪п╪▒ я║│я║Оя╗│я║Ц ╪зя║│я║Шя╗о╪пя╗│я╗о ╪зя╗зя╗┤я╗дя╗┤я║╕я╗ж ╪в╪▒я╗│я║ОтАм

тАлтАкwww.ariya3d.comтАмтАм

тАля╗гя║кя╗│я║о я╗гя║┤я║Мя╗о┘Д я╗гя╗мя╗ия║к╪│ я║│я╗┤я║к я║Яя╗о╪з╪п я║│я╗┤я║к я╗гя║дя║┤я╗ия╗▓тАм

тАля║Ся║ояоФя║░╪з╪▒┘К ╪в╪▓я╗гя╗оя╗зя╗мя║О┘К ╪вя╗зя╗╝я╗│я╗ж ╪п╪▒ я╗Ыя╗ая╗┤я╗к я║│я╗Дя╗о╪н я╗ля╗дя║о╪з┘З я║Ся║О ╪з╪▒╪зя║Ля╗к я╗Ыя║О╪▒я╗зя║Оя╗гя╗к ╪п╪▒ я║│я║Оя╗│я║Ц тАк:тАмтАм

тАлтАкwww.newsanjesh.comтАмтАм

тАля╗гя║кя╗│я║о я╗гя║┤я║Мя╗о┘Д я╗гя╗мя╗ия║к╪│ я║гя║┤я╗┤я╗ж ян╝я╗ия║О╪▒┘КтАм

тАля║Чя╗ая╗Фя╗ж я║Чя╗дя║Оя║▒ тАк█▓█▓█╕█╢█╣█┤█░█│ - █▓█▓█╕█╢█│█╣█╕█╣тАмтАм

тАлтАк50тАмтАм

тАлтАкAdobe PhotoshopтАмтАм

Photoshop ‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ‬

Adobe Photoshop

www.ariya3d.com

51

‫اﺳﺘﻮدﻳﻮ اﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ آرﻳﺎ‬